
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of 
hekeus@3: %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
hekeus@3: %% conferences.
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% Support sites:
hekeus@3: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
hekeus@3: %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
hekeus@3: %% and
hekeus@3: %% http://www.ieee.org/
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
hekeus@3: %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Contributors:
hekeus@3: %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
hekeus@3: %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
hekeus@3: %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, 
hekeus@3: %%                         Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
hekeus@3: %%                         Juergen von Hagen
hekeus@3: %%                         and
hekeus@3: %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
hekeus@3: %%                                    See:
hekeus@3: %%                                    http://www.michaelshell.org/
hekeus@3: %%                                    for current contact information.
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
hekeus@3: %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command 
hekeus@3: %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. 
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %%*************************************************************************
hekeus@3: %% Legal Notice:
hekeus@3: %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
hekeus@3: %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
hekeus@3: %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! 
hekeus@3: %% User assumes all risk.
hekeus@3: %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
hekeus@3: %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
hekeus@3: %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
hekeus@3: %% of any information contained here.
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
hekeus@3: %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
hekeus@3: %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
hekeus@3: %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
hekeus@3: %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
hekeus@3: %% 2003/12/01 or later.
hekeus@3: %% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
hekeus@3: %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including  **
hekeus@3: %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
hekeus@3: %%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an 
hekeus@3: %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will 
hekeus@3: %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
hekeus@3: %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
hekeus@3: %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
hekeus@3: %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
hekeus@3: %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
hekeus@3: %% correct version information.
hekeus@3: %% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
hekeus@3: %%*************************************************************************
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % Available class options 
hekeus@3: % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} 
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: %             *** choose only one from each category ***
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
hekeus@3: %    Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
hekeus@3: %    determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
hekeus@3: %    correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
hekeus@3: %    should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
hekeus@3: %    journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
hekeus@3: %    anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
hekeus@3: %    repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
hekeus@3: %    papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
hekeus@3: %    automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
hekeus@3: %    cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
hekeus@3: %    not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
hekeus@3: %    peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
hekeus@3: %    as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
hekeus@3: %    information can be easily seen on the cover page.
hekeus@3: %    The default is journal.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
hekeus@3: %    determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
hekeus@3: %    handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
hekeus@3: %    draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
hekeus@3: %    packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
hekeus@3: %    for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
hekeus@3: %    draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
hekeus@3: %    of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
hekeus@3: %    also want to select onecolumn.
hekeus@3: %    The default is final.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % letterpaper, a4paper
hekeus@3: %    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
hekeus@3: %    SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
hekeus@3: %    WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
hekeus@3: %    have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
hekeus@3: %    bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
hekeus@3: %    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. 
hekeus@3: %    For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
hekeus@3: %    paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing 
hekeus@3: %    (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
hekeus@3: %    Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
hekeus@3: %    IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex 
hekeus@3: %    (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
hekeus@3: %    important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
hekeus@3: %    dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
hekeus@3: %    testflow documentation
hekeus@3: %    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
hekeus@3: %    for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
hekeus@3: %    The default is letterpaper.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % oneside, twoside
hekeus@3: %    determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
hekeus@3: %    printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
hekeus@3: %    the pages.
hekeus@3: %    The default is oneside.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % onecolumn, twocolumn
hekeus@3: %    determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
hekeus@3: %    column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
hekeus@3: %    The default is twocolumn.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % compsoc
hekeus@3: %    Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % romanappendices
hekeus@3: %    Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
hekeus@3: %    now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
hekeus@3: %    v1.6b and earlier did.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % captionsoff
hekeus@3: %    disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
hekeus@3: %    request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
hekeus@3: %    of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
hekeus@3: %    package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % nofonttune
hekeus@3: %    turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
hekeus@3: %    not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
hekeus@3: %    their fonts.
hekeus@3: %    The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: %----------
hekeus@3: % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % Available CLASSINFOs provided:
hekeus@3: % \ifCLASSINFOpdf                       (TeX if conditional)
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth                  (macro)
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOpaperheight                 (macro)
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip      (length)
hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
hekeus@3: % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
hekeus@3: % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
hekeus@3: % point size options provided as a single macro:
hekeus@3: % \CLASSOPTIONpt
hekeus@3: % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
hekeus@3: % normalsize point size.
hekeus@3: % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
hekeus@3: % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
hekeus@3: \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
hekeus@3: % These values serve as a way a .tex file can
hekeus@3: % determine if the new features are provided.
hekeus@3: % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from 
hekeus@3: % these values. i.e., V1.4
hekeus@3: % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
hekeus@3: % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
hekeus@3: \newif\if@restonecol
hekeus@3: \newif\if@titlepage
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % class option conditionals
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn       \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn       \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside         \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal           \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft           \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls        \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot  \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview      \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca    \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal         \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference      \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote        \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune      \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff     \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc         \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % class info conditionals
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf               \CLASSINFOpdffalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper       \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
hekeus@3: % dimen
hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
hekeus@3: % count
hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
hekeus@3: % token list
hekeus@3: \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
hekeus@3: % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
hekeus@3: % external packages
hekeus@3: \def\@ptsize{0}
hekeus@3: % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
hekeus@3:                             \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
hekeus@3:                             \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
hekeus@3:                             \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
hekeus@3:                             \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
hekeus@3:                             \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
hekeus@3:                         \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
hekeus@3:                         \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
hekeus@3:                         \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
hekeus@3:                         \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
hekeus@3:                         \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
hekeus@3:                         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
hekeus@3:                         \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
hekeus@3: % will go into draft mode.
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
hekeus@3:                       \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
hekeus@3: % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
hekeus@3: % used by the document.
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
hekeus@3:                          \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
hekeus@3: % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
hekeus@3:                                \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
hekeus@3:                       \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
hekeus@3:                         \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
hekeus@3:                            \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
hekeus@3:                          \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
hekeus@3:                            \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
hekeus@3:                              \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
hekeus@3: \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
hekeus@3: % overrride these defaults per user requests
hekeus@3: \ProcessOptions
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Computer Society conditional execution command
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: % inverse
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: % compsoc conference
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: % compsoc not conference
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
hekeus@3: % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
hekeus@3: % not Times Roman.
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % enable Times/Palatino main text font
hekeus@3: \normalfont\selectfont
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 conference notice message hook
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ of your paper;}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we can send console reminder messages to the user here
hekeus@3: \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
hekeus@3:   \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
hekeus@3:    \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
hekeus@3:   \fi%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
hekeus@3: % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
hekeus@3: % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
hekeus@3: % even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
hekeus@3: % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
hekeus@3: {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
hekeus@3: % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
hekeus@3: % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
hekeus@3: % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
hekeus@3: \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
hekeus@3: \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
hekeus@3: % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
hekeus@3: \ifcase\pdfoutput
hekeus@3: \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
hekeus@3: \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
hekeus@3: \fi}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % let the user know the selected papersize
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
hekeus@3: (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSINFOpdf
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
hekeus@3: % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
hekeus@3: % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
hekeus@3: % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
hekeus@3: % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
hekeus@3: % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
hekeus@3: % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
hekeus@3: %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
hekeus@3: %\def\@journal{}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % pointsize values
hekeus@3: % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
hekeus@3: %      revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
hekeus@3: %      on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
hekeus@3: %      normalsize     #lines/column  baselineskip (aka leading)
hekeus@3: %             9pt     63             11.0476pt (truncated down)
hekeus@3: %            10pt     58             12pt      (exact)
hekeus@3: %            11pt     52             13.3846pt (truncated down)
hekeus@3: %            12pt     50             13.92pt   (exact)
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
hekeus@3: % in case baselinestretch ever changes.
hekeus@3: % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
hekeus@3: \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
hekeus@3: \normalsize
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 10 points
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
hekeus@3: \normalsize
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
hekeus@3: % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 11 points
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
hekeus@3: \normalsize
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 12 points
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
hekeus@3: \normalsize
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
hekeus@3: % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
hekeus@3: % tolerance to turn off this warning
hekeus@3: \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
hekeus@3: % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
hekeus@3: % technote
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
hekeus@3:   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
hekeus@3:  \fi%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7
hekeus@3: % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
hekeus@3: % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
hekeus@3: % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
hekeus@3: \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
hekeus@3: \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % set the default \baselinestretch
hekeus@3: \def\baselinestretch{1}
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:   \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
hekeus@3: \fi 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:   \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
hekeus@3:   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
hekeus@3:            \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % store the normalsize baselineskip
hekeus@3: \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
hekeus@3: \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
hekeus@3: % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
hekeus@3: % we could save a register by giving the user access to
hekeus@3: % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
hekeus@3: % its read only internal status
hekeus@3: \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
hekeus@3: \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
hekeus@3: % store the nominal value of jot
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
hekeus@3: \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % set \jot
hekeus@3: \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
hekeus@3: % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
hekeus@3: % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
hekeus@3: % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
hekeus@3: % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
hekeus@3: % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
hekeus@3: % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
hekeus@3: % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
hekeus@3: % 35% nominal
hekeus@3: % 23% minimum
hekeus@3: % 50% maximum
hekeus@3: % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
hekeus@3: % 37.5% nominal
hekeus@3: % 23% minimum
hekeus@3: % 55% maximum
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
hekeus@3: % for medium (normal weight)
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % for bold
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
hekeus@3: % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
hekeus@3: % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
hekeus@3: % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
hekeus@3: % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
hekeus@3: % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
hekeus@3: \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
hekeus@3: \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
hekeus@3: \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % revise the interword spacing for each font weight
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
hekeus@3: \mdseries
hekeus@3: \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
hekeus@3: \bfseries
hekeus@3: \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
hekeus@3: }}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % revise the interword spacing for each font shape
hekeus@3: % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
hekeus@3: % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
hekeus@3: % won't alter these either.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
hekeus@3: \normalfont
hekeus@3: \@@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \normalfont\itshape
hekeus@3: \@@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: }}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
hekeus@3: % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a 
hekeus@3: % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
hekeus@3: \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
hekeus@3: \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
hekeus@3: % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
hekeus@3: % sure all the default fonts are loaded
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtunefonts
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 
hekeus@3: % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
hekeus@3: % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
hekeus@3: % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
hekeus@3: % warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
hekeus@3: % but the appearance will be much better "right out
hekeus@3: % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
hekeus@3: % TeX default is 50
hekeus@3: \hyphenpenalty=750
hekeus@3: % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
hekeus@3: % The TeX default is 1000
hekeus@3: \hbadness=1350
hekeus@3: % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
hekeus@3: \frenchspacing
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
hekeus@3: \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
hekeus@3: \relpenalty=800     % default 500
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % margin note stuff
hekeus@3: \marginparsep      10pt
hekeus@3: \marginparwidth    20pt
hekeus@3: \marginparpush     25pt
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
hekeus@3: \lineskip            0pt
hekeus@3: \normallineskip      0pt
hekeus@3: \lineskiplimit       0pt
hekeus@3: \normallineskiplimit 0pt
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
hekeus@3: % footline
hekeus@3: \footskip 0.4in
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % normally zero, should be relative to font height.
hekeus@3: % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
hekeus@3: \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \parindent    1.0em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \topmargin    -49.0pt
hekeus@3: \headheight   12pt
hekeus@3: \headsep      0.25in
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % use the normal font baselineskip
hekeus@3: % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
hekeus@3: \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
hekeus@3: \textheight       58pc  % 9.63in, 696pt
hekeus@3: % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
hekeus@3: % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used 
hekeus@3: % to determine these values.
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 63 lines/page
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 58 lines/page
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 52 lines/page
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \columnsep         1pc
hekeus@3: \textwidth        43pc   % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
hekeus@3:  
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % the default side margins are equal
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin        14.32mm
hekeus@3: \evensidemargin       14.32mm
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin        0.680in
hekeus@3: \evensidemargin       0.680in
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % adjust margins for conference mode
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3:  \topmargin        -0.25in
hekeus@3:  % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
hekeus@3:  \textheight        9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
hekeus@3:  % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 61 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 56 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % compsoc conference
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3:  % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
hekeus@3:  \columnsep 0.375in
hekeus@3:  % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
hekeus@3:  \topmargin        0in
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
hekeus@3:  % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
hekeus@3:  \textheight        8.875in % (641.39625pt)
hekeus@3:  % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 58 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 53 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
hekeus@3:  \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 46 lines/page 
hekeus@3:  \textwidth 6.5in
hekeus@3:  % the default side margins are equal
hekeus@3:  \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
hekeus@3:   \oddsidemargin        22.45mm
hekeus@3:   \evensidemargin       22.45mm
hekeus@3:  \else
hekeus@3:   \oddsidemargin        1in
hekeus@3:   \evensidemargin       1in
hekeus@3:  \fi
hekeus@3:  % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3:  \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3: \fi\fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % draft mode settings override that of all other modes
hekeus@3: % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
hekeus@3: % space between the lines for editor's comments
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls 
hekeus@3:   % want 1in from top of paper to text
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
hekeus@3:   % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
hekeus@3:   \oddsidemargin      0in
hekeus@3:   \evensidemargin     0in
hekeus@3:   % set the text width
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
hekeus@3:   % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
hekeus@3:   % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
hekeus@3:   \divide\textheight  by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:   \multiply\textheight  by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
hekeus@3: % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:   \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3:     \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:   % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
hekeus@3:   \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3:     \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
hekeus@3:     \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \else
hekeus@3:     \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
hekeus@3:   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and 
hekeus@3:            outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
hekeus@3: % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:   \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3:     \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:   % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
hekeus@3:   \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
hekeus@3:     \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
hekeus@3:   \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
hekeus@3:   % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
hekeus@3:   % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
hekeus@3:   % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
hekeus@3:   % correct for both.
hekeus@3:   \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
hekeus@3:   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and 
hekeus@3:            bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % LIST SPACING CONTROLS
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
hekeus@3: % above and below \trivlist 
hekeus@3: % Both \list and IED lists override this.
hekeus@3: % However, \trivlist will use this as will most
hekeus@3: % things built from \trivlist like the \center
hekeus@3: % environment.
hekeus@3: \topsep           0.5\baselineskip
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
hekeus@3: % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
hekeus@3: % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
hekeus@3: % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
hekeus@3: \partopsep          \z@
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. 
hekeus@3: % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
hekeus@3: % so this is also zero. 
hekeus@3: % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
hekeus@3: % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
hekeus@3: \parsep             \z@
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Controls the extra spacing between list items. 
hekeus@3: % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
hekeus@3: % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
hekeus@3: % lists (but not IED lists).
hekeus@3: \itemsep            \z@
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
hekeus@3: % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
hekeus@3: % it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
hekeus@3: % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
hekeus@3: % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
hekeus@3: \itemindent         -1em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
hekeus@3: % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
hekeus@3: % Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
hekeus@3: % But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
hekeus@3: \leftmargin         2em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
hekeus@3: % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
hekeus@3: % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
hekeus@3: % all are overridden.
hekeus@3: \leftmargini        2em
hekeus@3: %\itemindent         2em  % Alternative values: sometimes used.
hekeus@3: %\leftmargini        0em
hekeus@3: \leftmarginii       1em
hekeus@3: \leftmarginiii    1.5em
hekeus@3: \leftmarginiv     1.5em
hekeus@3: \leftmarginv      1.0em
hekeus@3: \leftmarginvi     1.0em
hekeus@3: \labelsep         0.5em 
hekeus@3: \labelwidth         \z@
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
hekeus@3: % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
hekeus@3: % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
hekeus@3: % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). 
hekeus@3: % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
hekeus@3: % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
hekeus@3: % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in 
hekeus@3: % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
hekeus@3: % of these values DO affect \list
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
hekeus@3: \let\@listI\@listi
hekeus@3: \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
hekeus@3:     \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
hekeus@3: \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
hekeus@3:     \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
hekeus@3: \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
hekeus@3:     \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
hekeus@3: \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
hekeus@3:     \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
hekeus@3: \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
hekeus@3:     \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses 5) not 5.
hekeus@3: \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)}     \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses a) not (a)
hekeus@3: \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)}  \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses iii) not iii.
hekeus@3: \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses A) not A.
hekeus@3: \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)}   \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % exactly the same as in article.cls
hekeus@3: \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
hekeus@3: \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
hekeus@3: \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % itemized list label styles
hekeus@3: \def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
hekeus@3: \def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
hekeus@3: \def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
hekeus@3: \def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
hekeus@3: % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
hekeus@3: % ***************************
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
hekeus@3: % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
hekeus@3: % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
hekeus@3: % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
hekeus@3: % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
hekeus@3: % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
hekeus@3: % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose 
hekeus@3: % which one you like in your document using a command such as:
hekeus@3: % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
hekeus@3: % However, we'll default to using \parindent
hekeus@3: % which makes more sense to me
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
hekeus@3: % are indented to the right.
hekeus@3: % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
hekeus@3: \IEEEelabelindent \parindent
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This controls the default amount the description list labels
hekeus@3: % are indented to the right.
hekeus@3: % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
hekeus@3: \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
hekeus@3: % The IED environments automatically set its value to
hekeus@3: % one of the three values above, so global changes do 
hekeus@3: % not have any effect
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEElabelindent
hekeus@3: \IEEElabelindent \parindent
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % The actual amount labels will be indented is
hekeus@3: % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
hekeus@3: % corresponding to the level of nesting depth
hekeus@3: % This provides a means by which the user can
hekeus@3: % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
hekeus@3: % levels
hekeus@3: % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
hekeus@3: % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
hekeus@3: % circumstances.
hekeus@3: % The first list level almost always has full indention.
hekeus@3: % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
hekeus@3: % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
hekeus@3: % that they don't use any indentation.
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0}   % almost always one
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
hekeus@3: % set to one of the 6 values above
hekeus@3: % global changes here have no effect
hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
hekeus@3: % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
hekeus@3: % the labels.
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
hekeus@3: \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
hekeus@3: % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
hekeus@3: % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the 
hekeus@3: % spacing in these cases
hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
hekeus@3: \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
hekeus@3: % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
hekeus@3: % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
hekeus@3: \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
hekeus@3: \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This command is executed within each IED list environment
hekeus@3: % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the 
hekeus@3: % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing 
hekeus@3: % global parameters that affect things other than lists.
hekeus@3: % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
hekeus@3: % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
hekeus@3: % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
hekeus@3: % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
hekeus@3: % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
hekeus@3: % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
hekeus@3: % width of the given text. It is the same as
hekeus@3: % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
hekeus@3: % and useful as a shorter alternative.
hekeus@3: % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
hekeus@3: % of the longest label in the list
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the 
hekeus@3: % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
hekeus@3: % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
hekeus@3: % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
hekeus@3: % environments.
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
hekeus@3: % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
hekeus@3: % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
hekeus@3: % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) 
hekeus@3: % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
hekeus@3: % environments to have an effect.
hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
hekeus@3: \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
hekeus@3: % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
hekeus@3: % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option 
hekeus@3: % of the IED list environments to have an effect.
hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
hekeus@3: \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % internal variable to indicate type of IED label
hekeus@3: % justification
hekeus@3: % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % commands to allow the user to control IED
hekeus@3: % label justifications. Use these commands within
hekeus@3: % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
hekeus@3: % Note that changing the normal list justifications
hekeus@3: % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
hekeus@3: % I include these commands as they may be helpful to
hekeus@3: % those who are using these enhanced list controls for
hekeus@3: % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
hekeus@3: % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
hekeus@3: % justification, description defaults to left.
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
hekeus@3: % this allows us to set all the list parameters within
hekeus@3: % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) 
hekeus@3: % from overriding any of our parameters
hekeus@3: % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
hekeus@3: \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
hekeus@3: \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
hekeus@3: \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
hekeus@3: \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
hekeus@3: \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
hekeus@3: \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
hekeus@3: \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
hekeus@3: \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
hekeus@3: \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
hekeus@3: % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
hekeus@3: % which must be created by the base classes
hekeus@3: % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
hekeus@3: \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
hekeus@3: \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
hekeus@3: \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
hekeus@3: \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
hekeus@3:                {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
hekeus@3:                         \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
hekeus@3:                {\endlist}
hekeus@3: \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
hekeus@3:                                  \normalfont\bfseries #1}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % override LaTeX's default IED lists
hekeus@3: \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
hekeus@3: \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
hekeus@3: \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
hekeus@3: \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
hekeus@3: \def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
hekeus@3: \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
hekeus@3: % override itemize, enumerate, or description
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
hekeus@3: % commands so they are protected against redefinition
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
hekeus@3:                 \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
hekeus@3:                 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
hekeus@3:                 \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
hekeus@3:                 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
hekeus@3:                 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
hekeus@3:                 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
hekeus@3:                 % set other defaults
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
hekeus@3:                 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
hekeus@3:                 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
hekeus@3:                 \partopsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \parsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \itemsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \rightmargin 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \listparindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \itemindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 % calculate the label width
hekeus@3:                 % the user can override this later if
hekeus@3:                 % they specified a \labelwidth
hekeus@3:                 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
hekeus@3:                 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
hekeus@3:                 \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
hekeus@3:                 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
hekeus@3:                                        % to our globals
hekeus@3:                 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
hekeus@3:                 #1\relax%
hekeus@3:                 % If the user has requested not to use the
hekeus@3:                 % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
hekeus@3:                 \fi%
hekeus@3:                 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
hekeus@3:                 % calculate our left margin based
hekeus@3:                 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
hekeus@3:                 % \labelsep
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
hekeus@3:                 \fi}\fi\fi}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
hekeus@3:                 \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
hekeus@3:                 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
hekeus@3:                 \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
hekeus@3:                 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
hekeus@3:                 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
hekeus@3:                 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
hekeus@3:                 % set other defaults
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
hekeus@3:                 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
hekeus@3:                 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
hekeus@3:                 \partopsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \parsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \itemsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \rightmargin 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \listparindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \itemindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 % calculate the label width
hekeus@3:                 % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
hekeus@3:                 % normalfont 1) to 9)
hekeus@3:                 % The user can override this later
hekeus@3:                 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
hekeus@3:                 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
hekeus@3:                 \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
hekeus@3:                 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
hekeus@3:                                        % to our globals
hekeus@3:                 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
hekeus@3:                 #1\relax%
hekeus@3:                 % If the user has requested not to use the
hekeus@3:                 % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
hekeus@3:                 \fi%
hekeus@3:                 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
hekeus@3:                 % calculate our left margin based
hekeus@3:                 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
hekeus@3:                 % \labelsep
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
hekeus@3:                 \fi}\fi\fi}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
hekeus@3:                 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
hekeus@3:                 % get the labelindentfactor for this level
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
hekeus@3:                 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
hekeus@3:                 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
hekeus@3:                 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
hekeus@3:                 % set other defaults
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
hekeus@3:                 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% 
hekeus@3:                 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
hekeus@3:                 % assume normal labelsep
hekeus@3:                 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
hekeus@3:                 \partopsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \parsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \itemsep 0ex%
hekeus@3:                 \rightmargin 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \listparindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 \itemindent 0em%
hekeus@3:                 % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
hekeus@3:                 % to set it.
hekeus@3:                 % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
hekeus@3:                 % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to 
hekeus@3:                 % display it on the screen during compilation 
hekeus@3:                 % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
hekeus@3:                 % which label is the widest)
hekeus@3:                 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
hekeus@3:                 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
hekeus@3:                 \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
hekeus@3:                                                % to our globals
hekeus@3:                 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
hekeus@3:                 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
hekeus@3:                 #1\relax%
hekeus@3:                 % If the user has requested not to use the
hekeus@3:                 % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
hekeus@3:                 \fi%
hekeus@3:                 % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
hekeus@3:                 % calculate our left margin based
hekeus@3:                 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
hekeus@3:                 % \labelsep
hekeus@3:                 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
hekeus@3:                 \fi}\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % VERSE and QUOTE
hekeus@3: % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
hekeus@3:     \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
hekeus@3:     \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
hekeus@3:     {\endlist}
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
hekeus@3:     \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
hekeus@3:     {\endlist}
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
hekeus@3:     {\endlist}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \titlepage
hekeus@3: % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
hekeus@3: % way to create the title page. 
hekeus@3: \newif\if@restonecol
hekeus@3: \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
hekeus@3:     \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
hekeus@3: \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % standard values from article.cls
hekeus@3: \arraycolsep     5pt
hekeus@3: \arrayrulewidth .4pt
hekeus@3: \doublerulesep   2pt
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \tabcolsep       6pt
hekeus@3: \tabbingsep      0.5em
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% FOOTNOTES
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
hekeus@3: % V1.6 respond to changes in font size
hekeus@3: % space added above the footnotes (if present)
hekeus@3: \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip  plus 0.4\baselineskip  minus 0.2\baselineskip
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
hekeus@3: % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
hekeus@3: % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
hekeus@3: % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
hekeus@3: % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
hekeus@3: % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
hekeus@3: % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
hekeus@3: % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
hekeus@3: % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
hekeus@3: % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
hekeus@3: % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
hekeus@3: % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
hekeus@3: {\footnotesize
hekeus@3: \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
hekeus@3: \fboxsep = 3pt
hekeus@3: \fboxrule = .4pt
hekeus@3: % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
hekeus@3: % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
hekeus@3: % box resizing tricks here.
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEE does not use footnote rules
hekeus@3: \def\footnoterule{}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
hekeus@3: % system to implement this.
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
hekeus@3: \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
hekeus@3: \kern-5pt
hekeus@3: \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
hekeus@3: \kern4.6pt
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \relax
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
hekeus@3: \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
hekeus@3: % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
hekeus@3: % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
hekeus@3: \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % default allows section depth up to /paragraph
hekeus@3: \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % technotes do not allow /paragraph
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
hekeus@3:    \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: % neither do compsoc conferences
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newcounter{section}
hekeus@3: \newcounter{subsection}[section]
hekeus@3: \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
hekeus@3: \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
hekeus@3: % have their own, different, implementations
hekeus@3: \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
hekeus@3: \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}                          % 1
hekeus@3: \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}  % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: % compsoc is all arabic
hekeus@3: \def\thesection{\arabic{section}}                
hekeus@3: \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
hekeus@3: \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \def\thesection{\Roman{section}}                             % I
hekeus@3: % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - 
hekeus@3: \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}}     % I-A
hekeus@3: % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}}  % I-A1
hekeus@3: \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}}         % I-A1a
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
hekeus@3: % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
hekeus@3: % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
hekeus@3: % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
hekeus@3: \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
hekeus@3: \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
hekeus@3: % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
hekeus@3: % in the former to automatically appear in the latter
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3:   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
hekeus@3:     \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
hekeus@3:     \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
hekeus@3:     \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
hekeus@3:     \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
hekeus@3:   \else% compsoc not conferencs
hekeus@3:     \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
hekeus@3:     \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
hekeus@3:     \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
hekeus@3:     \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3: \else% not compsoc
hekeus@3:   \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}                   % I.
hekeus@3:   \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.}          % B.
hekeus@3:   \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})}  % 3)
hekeus@3:   \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})}            % d)
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
hekeus@3: \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
hekeus@3: % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
hekeus@3: % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
hekeus@3: % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
hekeus@3: \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
hekeus@3: \def\contentsname{Contents}
hekeus@3: \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
hekeus@3: \def\listtablename{List of Tables}
hekeus@3: \def\refname{References}
hekeus@3: \def\indexname{Index}
hekeus@3: \def\figurename{Fig.}
hekeus@3: \def\tablename{TABLE}
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
hekeus@3: \def\partname{Part}
hekeus@3: \def\appendixname{Appendix}
hekeus@3: \def\abstractname{Abstract}
hekeus@3: % IEEE specific names
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
hekeus@3: \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
hekeus@3: \def\@dotsep{4.5}
hekeus@3: \setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily 
hekeus@3: % collide with the section titles. 
hekeus@3: % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
hekeus@3: % MDS 1/2001
hekeus@3: \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
hekeus@3: \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
hekeus@3:     \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
hekeus@3:     \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
hekeus@3:     \endgroup}
hekeus@3: % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
hekeus@3: \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
hekeus@3: \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
hekeus@3: % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
hekeus@3: % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
hekeus@3: % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
hekeus@3: \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
hekeus@3: \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
hekeus@3: \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
hekeus@3: \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
hekeus@3: \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
hekeus@3: \let\l@table\l@figure
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% Definitions for floats
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Normal Floats
hekeus@3: \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
hekeus@3: \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
hekeus@3: \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
hekeus@3: \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil 
hekeus@3: \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
hekeus@3: \def\topfraction{0.9}
hekeus@3: \def\bottomfraction{0.4}
hekeus@3: \def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
hekeus@3: % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
hekeus@3: \def\textfraction{0.1}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% Double Column Floats
hekeus@3: \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
hekeus@3: % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
hekeus@3: % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
hekeus@3: % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
hekeus@3: % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
hekeus@3: % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
hekeus@3: % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
hekeus@3: % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
hekeus@3: % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
hekeus@3: % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
hekeus@3: \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
hekeus@3: \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
hekeus@3: \def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
hekeus@3: \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
hekeus@3: \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
hekeus@3: \setcounter{topnumber}{2}
hekeus@3: \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
hekeus@3: \setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % article class provides these, we should too.
hekeus@3: \newlength\abovecaptionskip
hekeus@3: \newlength\belowcaptionskip
hekeus@3: % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
hekeus@3: % captions
hekeus@3: \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
hekeus@3: \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
hekeus@3: % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
hekeus@3: % overridden by a user
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
hekeus@3: % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table
hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption
hekeus@3: \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, center
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
hekeus@3: \fi\fi}
hekeus@3: \else% nonconference compsoc
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table
hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption
hekeus@3: \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
hekeus@3: \fi\fi}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table
hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption
hekeus@3: \footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
hekeus@3: % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
hekeus@3: \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
hekeus@3: \fi\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
hekeus@3: % within \caption
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
hekeus@3: \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
hekeus@3: \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
hekeus@3: % preview-latex
hekeus@3: \newcounter{figure}
hekeus@3: \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
hekeus@3: \def\fps@figure{tbp}
hekeus@3: \def\ftype@figure{1}
hekeus@3: \def\ext@figure{lof}
hekeus@3: \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
hekeus@3: \def\figure{\@float{figure}}
hekeus@3: \def\endfigure{\end@float}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
hekeus@3: \newcounter{table}
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: \def\fps@table{tbp}
hekeus@3: \def\ftype@table{2}
hekeus@3: \def\ext@table{lot}
hekeus@3: \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
hekeus@3: % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
hekeus@3: \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
hekeus@3: \def\endtable{\end@float}
hekeus@3: % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
hekeus@3: \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX 
hekeus@3: %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, 
hekeus@3: %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, 
hekeus@3: %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
hekeus@3: %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
hekeus@3: % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
hekeus@3: \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt  % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % The default math style used by the columns
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
hekeus@3: % The default text style used by the columns
hekeus@3: % default to using the current font
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
hekeus@3: % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
hekeus@3: % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as 
hekeus@3: % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
hekeus@3: \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEissubequationfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
hekeus@3: % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
hekeus@3: % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
hekeus@3: % check if column is defined
hekeus@3: \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
hekeus@3: \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
hekeus@3: \else% if not, error and use default type
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: Using a default centering column instead}%
hekeus@3: {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
hekeus@3: \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
hekeus@3: % used to build up the \halign preamble
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
hekeus@3: \@@IEEEappendtoksA}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
hekeus@3: % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
hekeus@3: \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % define some common column types for the user
hekeus@3: % math
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
hekeus@3: % text
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % vertical rules
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
hekeus@3: {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % horizontal rules
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % plain
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
hekeus@3: % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
hekeus@3: % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
hekeus@3: % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
hekeus@3: % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. 
hekeus@3: \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % creates a blank separator row
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values
hekeus@3: % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
hekeus@3: % get the skip value, based on the font commands
hekeus@3: % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
hekeus@3: % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values
hekeus@3: % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
hekeus@3: % get the skip value, based on the font commands
hekeus@3: % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
hekeus@3: % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % draws a single rule across all the columns optional
hekeus@3: % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
hekeus@3: % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule 
hekeus@3: % turn off any struts
hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
hekeus@3: % another single rule row 
hekeus@3: % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
hekeus@3: % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
hekeus@3: {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
hekeus@3: % another single rule row 
hekeus@3: % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
hekeus@3: % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
hekeus@3: {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % inserts a full row's worth of &'s
hekeus@3: % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
hekeus@3: % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
hekeus@3: \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
hekeus@3: \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
hekeus@3: \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
hekeus@3: \repeat%
hekeus@3: \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse    % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt}  % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue     % is to be used
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % save values
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % restore values
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % globally restores the strut height and depth to the 
hekeus@3: % master values and sets the master strut flag to true
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % restore values
hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
hekeus@3: % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
hekeus@3: % and the use master strut flag, global
hekeus@3: % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
hekeus@3: % into the isolation/strut column
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
hekeus@3: % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
hekeus@3: % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
hekeus@3: % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
hekeus@3: % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
hekeus@3: % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
hekeus@3: % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
hekeus@3: % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
hekeus@3: % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
hekeus@3: % font is used.
hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \else% arg one present
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \else% arg two present
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, just to be safe
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
hekeus@3: \else% outer, have to set master strut too
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
hekeus@3: % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
hekeus@3: % and depth to both the master and local struts.
hekeus@3: % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
hekeus@3: % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use 
hekeus@3: % of the local strut values.
hekeus@3: % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
hekeus@3: % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
hekeus@3: % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
hekeus@3: % font is used.
hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
hekeus@3: \skip0=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3: \else% arg one present
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
hekeus@3: \skip2=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3: \else% arg two present
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, just to be safe
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
hekeus@3: % get local strut size
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: % add it to the user supplied values
hekeus@3: \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % update the local strut size
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
hekeus@3: \else% outer, have to set master strut too
hekeus@3: % get master strut size
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: % add it to the user supplied values
hekeus@3: \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % update the local and master strut sizes
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % allow user a way to see the struts
hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
hekeus@3: \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
hekeus@3: % get master strut size
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: % get local strut size
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, probably not needed
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
hekeus@3: % allow user to see struts if desired
hekeus@3: \ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
hekeus@3: \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. 
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values
hekeus@3: % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \skip0=#1\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
hekeus@3: \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \skip2=#2\relax%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, probably not needed
hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax%
hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax%
hekeus@3: \ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
hekeus@3: \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
hekeus@3: % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
hekeus@3: \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. 
hekeus@3: % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
hekeus@3:    % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
hekeus@3:    % the star form was involked
hekeus@3:    \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
hekeus@3:    \else% not the star form
hekeus@3:    \global\@eqnswtrue
hekeus@3:    \fi% if star form
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
hekeus@3:    \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
hekeus@3:    \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
hekeus@3:    % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
hekeus@3:    \lineskip=0pt\relax
hekeus@3:    \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
hekeus@3:    \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
hekeus@3:    \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
hekeus@3:    \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
hekeus@3:    \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
hekeus@3:                              % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
hekeus@3:    \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
hekeus@3:    \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet 
hekeus@3:    \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
hekeus@3:    \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
hekeus@3:    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
hekeus@3:    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
hekeus@3:    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
hekeus@3:    % put in the column for the equation number
hekeus@3:    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
hekeus@3:    \toks0={##}%
hekeus@3:    % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
hekeus@3:    % add the isolation column
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
hekeus@3:    % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
hekeus@3:    % add the equation number col to the preamble
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
hekeus@3:    % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
hekeus@3:    % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
hekeus@3:    \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
hekeus@3:    % begin the display alignment
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
hekeus@3:    $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
hekeus@3:    % "exspand" the preamble
hekeus@3:    \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
hekeus@3: % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
hekeus@3: % restore counters to correct values and exit
hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
hekeus@3: \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
hekeus@3: \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
hekeus@3: $$\@ignoretrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
hekeus@3: \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
hekeus@3: % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
hekeus@3: % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
hekeus@3: % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
hekeus@3: % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
hekeus@3: % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
hekeus@3:    {\ifnum0=`}\fi
hekeus@3:    \@ifstar{%
hekeus@3:       \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
hekeus@3:    }{%
hekeus@3:       \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
hekeus@3:    }%
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
hekeus@3:    \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
hekeus@3:    \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
hekeus@3:    \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
hekeus@3:     \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
hekeus@3:                           environment}%
hekeus@3:     {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak 
hekeus@3:      specifications.}\relax%
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:     \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
hekeus@3:     \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
hekeus@3:     \repeat
hekeus@3:     % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
hekeus@3:     \fi
hekeus@3:     % execute the &'s
hekeus@3:     \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
hekeus@3:     % handle the strut/isolation column
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3:     &% and enter the equation number column
hekeus@3:     % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
hekeus@3:     % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
hekeus@3:     \if@eqnsw%
hekeus@3:      \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
hekeus@3:      \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
hekeus@3:      \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
hekeus@3:      \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
hekeus@3:      \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
hekeus@3:     \fi%
hekeus@3:     % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
hekeus@3:     \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
hekeus@3:     \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
hekeus@3:     % reset the number of columns the user actually used
hekeus@3:     \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
hekeus@3:     % the real end of the line
hekeus@3:     \cr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
hekeus@3: % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
hekeus@3: % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
hekeus@3: % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
hekeus@3: % within an hbox.
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
hekeus@3: % a \hbox{$ $} construct.
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
hekeus@3: % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
hekeus@3: % natural width is the default.
hekeus@3: % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} 
hekeus@3: % for \vcenter in non-math mode
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
hekeus@3: \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
hekeus@3:    \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
hekeus@3:    % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
hekeus@3:    \lineskip=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3:    \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3:    \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
hekeus@3:    \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
hekeus@3:    \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
hekeus@3:    % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
hekeus@3:    \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
hekeus@3:    \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
hekeus@3:    \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
hekeus@3:    \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
hekeus@3:                               % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
hekeus@3:    \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
hekeus@3:    #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
hekeus@3:    \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
hekeus@3:    % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
hekeus@3:    \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
hekeus@3:    \toks0={##}%
hekeus@3:    % add the isolation column to the preamble
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% 
hekeus@3:    % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
hekeus@3:    \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
hekeus@3:    % begin the alignment
hekeus@3:    \everycr{}%
hekeus@3:    % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
hekeus@3:    % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
hekeus@3:    % but is probably not worth the effort
hekeus@3:    % \noindent is used as a delimiter
hekeus@3:    \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
hekeus@3:    % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
hekeus@3:    % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
hekeus@3:    \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
hekeus@3:    % use the appropriate vbox type
hekeus@3:    \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
hekeus@3:    \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
hekeus@3:    \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
hekeus@3:    \bgroup
hekeus@3:    % "exspand" the preamble
hekeus@3:    \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, 
hekeus@3: % exit from math mode if needed, and exit
hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
hekeus@3: &% enter isolation/strut column
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
hekeus@3: % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
hekeus@3: % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
hekeus@3: \crcr\egroup\egroup%
hekeus@3: % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
hekeus@3: % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
hekeus@3: % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
hekeus@3: % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
hekeus@3: % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
hekeus@3: % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
hekeus@3: % carry strut status into isolation/strut column
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
hekeus@3: &% enter isolation/strut column
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
hekeus@3: % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
hekeus@3: {\ifnum0=`}\fi%
hekeus@3: \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
hekeus@3: \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % starts the halign preamble build
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
hekeus@3: % ensure these are valid
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
hekeus@3: % currently acquired numerically referenced glue
hekeus@3: % use a name that is easier to remember
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
hekeus@3: % tracks number of columns in the preamble
hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
hekeus@3: % record the default end glues
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
hekeus@3: % now parse the user's column specifications
hekeus@3: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % parses and builds the halign preamble
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to check the end
hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
hekeus@3: % identify current and next token type
hekeus@3: \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
hekeus@3: \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
hekeus@3: % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
hekeus@3: % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
hekeus@3: % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
hekeus@3: % process the acquired glue 
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
hekeus@3: % process the acquired col 
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
hekeus@3: % ready prevtype for next col spec.
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
hekeus@3: % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
hekeus@3: \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % executed just after preamble build is completed
hekeus@3: % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
hekeus@3: {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
hekeus@3: \fi%num cols less than 1
hekeus@3: %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Identify and return the column specifier's type code
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to determine the type
hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
hekeus@3: % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
hekeus@3: % n = number
hekeus@3: % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
hekeus@3: % c = letter
hekeus@3: % e = \end
hekeus@3: % u = undefined
hekeus@3: % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
hekeus@3: \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
hekeus@3: \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
hekeus@3: \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
hekeus@3: \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
hekeus@3: \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
hekeus@3: \if#2u\relax
hekeus@3: \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
hekeus@3: {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
hekeus@3: as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % identify the current letter referenced column
hekeus@3: % if invalid, use a default column
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: Using a default centering column instead}%
hekeus@3: {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
hekeus@3: % ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
hekeus@3: % , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
hekeus@3: % : = \: (med)         0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
hekeus@3: % ; = \; (large)       0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
hekeus@3: % ' = \quad            1em
hekeus@3: % " = \qquad           2em
hekeus@3: % . = 0.5\arraycolsep
hekeus@3: % / = \arraycolsep
hekeus@3: % ? = 2\arraycolsep
hekeus@3: % * = 1fil
hekeus@3: % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
hekeus@3: % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
hekeus@3: % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
hekeus@3: % value for 1em.
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to determine the type
hekeus@3: % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter here
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
hekeus@3: % get the math font 1em value
hekeus@3: % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
hekeus@3: % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
hekeus@3: % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
hekeus@3: % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
hekeus@3: % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
hekeus@3: % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
hekeus@3: % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
hekeus@3: % identify the glue value based on the first token
hekeus@3: % we discard anything after the first
hekeus@3: \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
hekeus@3: \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
hekeus@3: \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
hekeus@3: \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
hekeus@3: \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
hekeus@3: \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: 0pt instead}%
hekeus@3: {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak 
hekeus@3: IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process a numerical digit from the column specification
hekeus@3: % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
hekeus@3: % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: after the first}%
hekeus@3: {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
hekeus@3: in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
hekeus@3: \else% if we previously aborted a glue
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
hekeus@3: \else%acquire this number
hekeus@3: % save the previous type before the numerical digits started
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
hekeus@3: \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
hekeus@3: \else%user glue not defined
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: 0pt instead}%
hekeus@3: {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
hekeus@3: \fi% glue defined or not
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
hekeus@3: \fi%close acquisition, get glue
hekeus@3: \fi%discard or acquire number
hekeus@3: \fi%prevtype glue or not
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process an acquired glue
hekeus@3: % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else 
hekeus@3: % as this is not used in the preamble, but before
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
hekeus@3: \else%not the start glue
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: after the first}%
hekeus@3: {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
hekeus@3: in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
hekeus@3: \else% not a back to back glue
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
hekeus@3: \toks0={##}%
hekeus@3: % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
hekeus@3: % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
hekeus@3: % the column definition
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
hekeus@3: \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak 
hekeus@3: specifier}%
hekeus@3: {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
hekeus@3: between column types.}%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
hekeus@3: \fi% previous was a column
hekeus@3: \fi% back-to-back glues
hekeus@3: \fi% is start column glue
hekeus@3: \fi% prev type not a
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
hekeus@3: % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
hekeus@3: % so we must add this column to the preamble now
hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
hekeus@3: \toks0={##}%
hekeus@3: % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
hekeus@3: % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
hekeus@3: % the column definition
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
hekeus@3: \fi%next type not numeral
hekeus@3: \fi%next type not glue
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
hekeus@3: % modes IEEEtran supports
hekeus@3: \if@twoside
hekeus@3:  \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
hekeus@3:    \def\ps@headings{%
hekeus@3:        \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
hekeus@3:        \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
hekeus@3:        \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:             \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
hekeus@3:                \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
hekeus@3:             \else
hekeus@3:                \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
hekeus@3:                \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
hekeus@3:             \fi
hekeus@3:        \else
hekeus@3:             \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
hekeus@3:        \fi}
hekeus@3:  \else % not a technote
hekeus@3:    \def\ps@headings{%
hekeus@3:        \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3:         \def\@oddhead{}
hekeus@3:         \def\@evenhead{}
hekeus@3:        \else
hekeus@3:         \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
hekeus@3:         \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
hekeus@3:        \fi
hekeus@3:        \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:             \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
hekeus@3:             \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
hekeus@3:             \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
hekeus@3:                \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
hekeus@3:             \else
hekeus@3:                \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
hekeus@3:                \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
hekeus@3:             \fi
hekeus@3:        \else
hekeus@3:             \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
hekeus@3:        \fi}
hekeus@3:  \fi
hekeus@3: \else % single side
hekeus@3: \def\ps@headings{%
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3:      \def\@oddhead{}
hekeus@3:      \def\@evenhead{}
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:      \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
hekeus@3:      \def\@evenhead{}
hekeus@3:     \fi
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:           \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
hekeus@3:           \def\@evenhead{}
hekeus@3:           \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
hekeus@3:              \def\@oddfoot{}
hekeus@3:           \else
hekeus@3:              \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
hekeus@3:           \fi
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:          \def\@oddfoot{}
hekeus@3:     \fi
hekeus@3:     \def\@evenfoot{}}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % title page style
hekeus@3: \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3:    \def\@oddhead{}%
hekeus@3:    \def\@evenhead{}%
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
hekeus@3:    \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:    \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
hekeus@3:    \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
hekeus@3:       \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
hekeus@3:       \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:    % all non-draft mode footers
hekeus@3:    \if@IEEEusingpubid
hekeus@3:       % for title pages that are using a pubid
hekeus@3:       % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
hekeus@3:       \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3:       \else
hekeus@3:          \footskip 0pt%
hekeus@3:          \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3:            \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:            \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:          \else
hekeus@3:            \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:            \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:          \fi
hekeus@3:       \fi
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % peer review cover page style
hekeus@3: \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
hekeus@3:       \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
hekeus@3:       \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:    % non-draft mode footers
hekeus@3:    \if@IEEEusingpubid
hekeus@3:       \footskip 0pt%
hekeus@3:       \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3:         \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:         \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:       \else
hekeus@3:         \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:         \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
hekeus@3:       \fi
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % start with empty headings
hekeus@3: \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
hekeus@3: %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. 
hekeus@3: %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
hekeus@3: %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
hekeus@3: %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
hekeus@3: %% arguments to \markboth.
hekeus@3: \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
hekeus@3: \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
hekeus@3: \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
hekeus@3:     January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
hekeus@3:     July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
hekeus@3:     \space\number\day, \number\year}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
hekeus@3: %% 
hekeus@3: %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
hekeus@3: \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
hekeus@3:   \let\@citea\@empty
hekeus@3:   \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
hekeus@3:     {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
hekeus@3:      \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
hekeus@3:      \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
hekeus@3:      \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
hekeus@3:        \G@refundefinedtrue
hekeus@3:        \@latex@warning
hekeus@3:          {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
hekeus@3:        {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
hekeus@3: % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
hekeus@3: % following format controls are already defined and will not
hekeus@3: % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
hekeus@3: % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
hekeus@3: % all in IEEE style:  [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
hekeus@3: % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
hekeus@3: % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
hekeus@3: % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
hekeus@3: % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
hekeus@3: % that \cite.
hekeus@3: % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
hekeus@3: % to produce the IEEE style.
hekeus@3: \def\citepunct{], [}
hekeus@3: \def\citedash{]--[}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 class files should always provide these
hekeus@3: \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
hekeus@3: \let\@openbib@code\@empty
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
hekeus@3: % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
hekeus@3: % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
hekeus@3: % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
hekeus@3: % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
hekeus@3: \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
hekeus@3:   \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
hekeus@3:     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
hekeus@3:     \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
hekeus@3:   \@esphack}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before 
hekeus@3: % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
hekeus@3: % the columns on the last page
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0}   % the default of zero means that
hekeus@3:                               % the command is not executed
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % allow the user to alter the triggered command
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
hekeus@3: % command is executed
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % trigger command at the given reference
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
hekeus@3: \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % controls bib item spacing
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
hekeus@3:     \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
hekeus@3:     % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
hekeus@3:     \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
hekeus@3:     \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
hekeus@3:     {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
hekeus@3:     \leftmargin\labelwidth
hekeus@3:     \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
hekeus@3:     \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
hekeus@3:     \usecounter{enumiv}%
hekeus@3:     \let\p@enumiv\@empty
hekeus@3:     \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
hekeus@3:     \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
hekeus@3:     \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
hekeus@3: \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
hekeus@3: % originally:
hekeus@3: %   \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
hekeus@3: % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
hekeus@3: % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
hekeus@3: % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
hekeus@3: % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, 
hekeus@3: % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. 
hekeus@3: % MDS 11/2000
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
hekeus@3: \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
hekeus@3:     \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
hekeus@3: \let\endthebibliography=\endlist
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author 
hekeus@3: % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
hekeus@3:  
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
hekeus@3: % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
hekeus@3: % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} 
hekeus@3: % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you 
hekeus@3: % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
hekeus@3: % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
hekeus@3: % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
hekeus@3: % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
hekeus@3: % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
hekeus@3: % with the text above.
hekeus@3: % V1.7 make this a robust command
hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
hekeus@3:     \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
hekeus@3:     \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
hekeus@3: % The default if the user does not use an author block
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
hekeus@3: % can be negative
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
hekeus@3: % compsoc conferences need more space here
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
hekeus@3: % This can be negative.
hekeus@3: % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
hekeus@3: % controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
hekeus@3: % Personally, I like 0.75ex.
hekeus@3: %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
hekeus@3: %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
hekeus@3: % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
hekeus@3: % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make 
hekeus@3: % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
hekeus@3: % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, 
hekeus@3: % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
hekeus@3: % these above 2.6ex
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This tracks the required strut size.
hekeus@3: % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % variables to retain font size and style across groups
hekeus@3: % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % saves the current font attributes
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % restores the saved font attributes
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
hekeus@3: \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
hekeus@3: \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
hekeus@3: \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
hekeus@3: \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
hekeus@3: \selectfont}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
hekeus@3: % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
hekeus@3: % within the halign environment.
hekeus@3: % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
hekeus@3: % baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
hekeus@3: % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
hekeus@3: \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. 
hekeus@3: % Makes formatting easy for conferences
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % use real definitions in conference mode
hekeus@3: % name block
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
hekeus@3: % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
hekeus@3: % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
hekeus@3: % do a spacer row if needed
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
hekeus@3: %restore the correct strut value
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
hekeus@3: % input the author names
hekeus@3: #1%
hekeus@3: % end the row if the user did not already
hekeus@3: \crcr}
hekeus@3: % spacer row for names
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % affiliation block
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
hekeus@3: % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
hekeus@3: % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
hekeus@3: % do a spacer row if needed
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
hekeus@3: %restore the correct strut value
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
hekeus@3: % input the author affiliations
hekeus@3: #1%
hekeus@3: % end the row if the user did not already
hekeus@3: \crcr}
hekeus@3: % spacer row for affiliations
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
hekeus@3: % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
hekeus@3:       % not conference or peerreviewca mode
hekeus@3:       \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
hekeus@3:       \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
hekeus@3:    \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
hekeus@3:    \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3:    \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
hekeus@3:    \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
hekeus@3:    \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
hekeus@3:    \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
hekeus@3:    \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
hekeus@3:    \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
hekeus@3:    \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
hekeus@3:    \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
hekeus@3:    \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % handle bogus star form
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % end the line and do the optional spacer
hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNand
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNandtrue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
hekeus@3: % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
hekeus@3: % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
hekeus@3: \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
hekeus@3:                                when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % page clearing command
hekeus@3: % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
hekeus@3: % for the inserted blank pages
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
hekeus@3: \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % user command to invoke the title page
hekeus@3: \def\maketitle{\par%
hekeus@3:   \begingroup%
hekeus@3:   \normalfont%
hekeus@3:   \def\thefootnote{}%  the \thanks{} mark type is empty
hekeus@3:   \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
hekeus@3:   \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
hekeus@3:   \footnotesize%       equal spacing between thanks lines
hekeus@3:   \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
hekeus@3:   % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
hekeus@3:   \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
hekeus@3:   \normalsize%
hekeus@3:   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3:      \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
hekeus@3:      \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
hekeus@3:   \else
hekeus@3:      \if@twocolumn%
hekeus@3:         \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
hekeus@3:            \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
hekeus@3:         \else
hekeus@3:            \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
hekeus@3:         \fi
hekeus@3:      \else
hekeus@3:         \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
hekeus@3:      \fi
hekeus@3:      \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3:   % pullup page for pubid if used.
hekeus@3:   \if@IEEEusingpubid
hekeus@3:      \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
hekeus@3:   \fi 
hekeus@3:   \endgroup
hekeus@3:   \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
hekeus@3:   \gdef\@thanks{}%
hekeus@3:   % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
hekeus@3:   % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
hekeus@3:   \let\thanks\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
hekeus@3: % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
hekeus@3: % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
hekeus@3: \def\@maketitle{\newpage
hekeus@3: \begin{center}%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
hekeus@3:    {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
hekeus@3:    \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
hekeus@3:    \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
hekeus@3: \else% not a technote
hekeus@3:    \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
hekeus@3:    \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%
hekeus@3:    % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
hekeus@3:       {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
hekeus@3:        \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
hekeus@3:    \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
hekeus@3:       \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
hekeus@3:          % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
hekeus@3:          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
hekeus@3:           \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
hekeus@3:           {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
hekeus@3:            \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
hekeus@3:            \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
hekeus@3:       \else% journal or peerreview
hekeus@3:          {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
hekeus@3:           {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
hekeus@3:            \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
hekeus@3:            \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
hekeus@3:       \fi
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi\end{center}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
hekeus@3: \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
hekeus@3: \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
hekeus@3: % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
hekeus@3:     \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
hekeus@3:         \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
hekeus@3:         \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
hekeus@3: \let\@thanks\@empty
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
hekeus@3: \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
hekeus@3: % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
hekeus@3: \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
hekeus@3: % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
hekeus@3:     \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
hekeus@3:         \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
hekeus@3:         {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
hekeus@3:         \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
hekeus@3: % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
hekeus@3: {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
hekeus@3: % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
hekeus@3: \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
hekeus@3: \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
hekeus@3: \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
hekeus@3: \end{center}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 
hekeus@3: % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
hekeus@3: % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
hekeus@3: % of two column text (technotes). 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
hekeus@3: % adjust spacing to next text
hekeus@3: % v1.6b handle peer review papers
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3: % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
hekeus@3: % regardless of the other paper modes
hekeus@3:    \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
hekeus@3:       \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
hekeus@3:    \else%
hekeus@3:       \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
hekeus@3:          \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
hekeus@3:       \else% journal uses more space
hekeus@3:          \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
hekeus@3:       \fi
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6
hekeus@3: % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors 
hekeus@3: % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two 
hekeus@3: % column text (most common)
hekeus@3: % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
hekeus@3: % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
hekeus@3: % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
hekeus@3: % text on the titlepage
hekeus@3: % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
hekeus@3:     % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
hekeus@3:     \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
hekeus@3:     \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
hekeus@3:     \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
hekeus@3:     \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
hekeus@3:     \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
hekeus@3:     % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
hekeus@3:     % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
hekeus@3:     % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
hekeus@3:     % lengthened
hekeus@3:     % default to journal values
hekeus@3:     \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:     \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:     % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
hekeus@3:      \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:      \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:     \fi
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
hekeus@3:       \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:       \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3:     \fi%
hekeus@3:     % get the height that the title will take up
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3:        \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:        \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
hekeus@3:     \fi
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
hekeus@3:     % add the height of the page textheight
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
hekeus@3:     % correct for title pages using pubid
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
hekeus@3:        % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
hekeus@3:        % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
hekeus@3:        \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
hekeus@3:     \fi%
hekeus@3:     % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
hekeus@3:     % \topskip takes away some too
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
hekeus@3:     % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
hekeus@3:     % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
hekeus@3:     % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
hekeus@3:     % and discard any excess fractional remainder
hekeus@3:     % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
hekeus@3:     % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
hekeus@3:     % rest of the lines.
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:     \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:     \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:     % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
hekeus@3:     % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
hekeus@3:     % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
hekeus@3:     % number of normal size lines
hekeus@3:     % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
hekeus@3:     % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
hekeus@3:     \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:     % this is the calculated height of the spacer
hekeus@3:     % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
hekeus@3:     % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
hekeus@3:     \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:     \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
hekeus@3:     % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
hekeus@3:     \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
hekeus@3:      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:      % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
hekeus@3:      \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
hekeus@3:       \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:      \fi%
hekeus@3:     \else%
hekeus@3:      % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
hekeus@3:      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
hekeus@3:      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
hekeus@3:     \fi%
hekeus@3:     % set the calculated rigid spacer
hekeus@3:     \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6
hekeus@3: % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
hekeus@3: % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
hekeus@3: % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
hekeus@3: % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
hekeus@3: % in the dynamic sizer.
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
hekeus@3: % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
hekeus@3: % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
hekeus@3: \else% or if not compsoc
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
hekeus@3: % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
hekeus@3: \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
hekeus@3: \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % abstract and keywords are in \small, except 
hekeus@3: % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
hekeus@3: % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
hekeus@3: % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
hekeus@3:  \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
hekeus@3: % so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont
hekeus@3:     \if@twocolumn
hekeus@3:       \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
hekeus@3:     \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in 
hekeus@3: % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
hekeus@3: \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
hekeus@3:     \normalfont\normalsize}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
hekeus@3:     \if@twocolumn
hekeus@3:       \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
hekeus@3:     \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
hekeus@3:     \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
hekeus@3:     \normalfont\normalsize}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3:   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
hekeus@3:       \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
hekeus@3:       \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
hekeus@3:       \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
hekeus@3:       \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3:   \else% compsoc not conference
hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
hekeus@3:     \if@twocolumn
hekeus@3:       \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
hekeus@3:     \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
hekeus@3:     \if@twocolumn
hekeus@3:       \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
hekeus@3:       \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
hekeus@3:     \else
hekeus@3:       \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
hekeus@3:     \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
hekeus@3:   \fi
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
hekeus@3: % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
hekeus@3: % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
hekeus@3: % affect the formatting of the text
hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % a control space will come in as a macro
hekeus@3: % when it is the last one on a line
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
hekeus@3: % else spit it out and stop gobbling
hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % TITLING OF SECTIONS
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,}  % Punctuation after run-in section heading  (headings which are
hekeus@3:                             % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
hekeus@3:                             % spacing from section number to title
hekeus@3: % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
hekeus@3: \fi\fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: % compsoc journals need extra spacing
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
hekeus@3: \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
hekeus@3: \fi\fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
hekeus@3: %and use \@@par rather than \par
hekeus@3: \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
hekeus@3:   \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
hekeus@3:      \let\@svsec\@empty
hekeus@3:   \else
hekeus@3:      \refstepcounter{#1}%
hekeus@3:      % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
hekeus@3:      \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
hekeus@3:   \fi%
hekeus@3:   \@tempskipa #5\relax
hekeus@3:   \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
hekeus@3:      \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
hekeus@3:       \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
hekeus@3:        % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
hekeus@3:        % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
hekeus@3:        {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
hekeus@3:      \endgroup
hekeus@3:      \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
hekeus@3:                \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
hekeus@3:   \else % printout low level headings
hekeus@3:      % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
hekeus@3:      % got rid of sectionmark stuff
hekeus@3:      \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
hekeus@3:      \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
hekeus@3:                \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
hekeus@3:   \fi%skip down
hekeus@3:   \@xsect{#5}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % section* handler
hekeus@3: %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
hekeus@3: %and use \@@par rather than \par
hekeus@3: \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
hekeus@3:   \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
hekeus@3:      %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
hekeus@3:      % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
hekeus@3:      \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
hekeus@3:   % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
hekeus@3:   \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
hekeus@3:   \@xsect{#3}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% SECTION heading spacing and font
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
hekeus@3: % (for \@sect)   #2 - section level
hekeus@3: %                #3 - section heading indent
hekeus@3: %                #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
hekeus@3: %                     If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
hekeus@3: %                #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
hekeus@3: %                      negative: amount to indent main text after heading
hekeus@3: %                Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
hekeus@3: %                #6 - font control
hekeus@3: % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
hekeus@3: % trouble when you do something like:
hekeus@3: % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... 
hekeus@3: % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
hekeus@3: % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
hekeus@3: % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
hekeus@3: % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
hekeus@3: \else % for journals
hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % for both journals and conferences
hekeus@3: % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % compsoc
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3: % compsoc conference
hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3: {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3: {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
hekeus@3: \else% compsoc journals
hekeus@3: % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
hekeus@3: % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
hekeus@3: % I have to look up an example.
hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
hekeus@3: {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
hekeus@3: \fi\fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% ENVIRONMENTS
hekeus@3: % "box" symbols at end of proofs
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
hekeus@3: % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen}   % default to open for compsoc
hekeus@3: \else
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
hekeus@3: % for an optional argument.
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
hekeus@3: \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
hekeus@3:     \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
hekeus@3: \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
hekeus@3: % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
hekeus@3:     \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
hekeus@3: % lines below.
hekeus@3: \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6
hekeus@3: % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
hekeus@3: % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
hekeus@3: % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
hekeus@3: % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
hekeus@3: % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
hekeus@3: % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
hekeus@3: % string macro
hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
hekeus@3: % if section in_counter is used
hekeus@3: \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
hekeus@3:   \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
hekeus@3:     {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
hekeus@3:      \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
hekeus@3:      \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
hekeus@3:      \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
hekeus@3:      \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
hekeus@3:           \@thmcounter{#1}}%
hekeus@3:      \else
hekeus@3:      \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
hekeus@3:        \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
hekeus@3:           \@thmcounter{#1}}%
hekeus@3:      \fi
hekeus@3:      \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
hekeus@3:      \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
hekeus@3: \ps@headings
hekeus@3: \pagenumbering{arabic}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % normally the page counter starts at 1
hekeus@3: \setcounter{page}{1}
hekeus@3: % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
hekeus@3: % (for duplex printing)
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
hekeus@3:    \if@twoside
hekeus@3:       \setcounter{page}{-1}
hekeus@3:    \else
hekeus@3:       \setcounter{page}{0}
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
hekeus@3: % needed when single sided
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
hekeus@3: % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
hekeus@3: % enforce a rigid position for the last lines
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
hekeus@3: % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
hekeus@3:    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
hekeus@3:       \twocolumn
hekeus@3:    \fi
hekeus@3: \sloppy 
hekeus@3: \flushbottom
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
hekeus@3: % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
hekeus@3: % is present or not.
hekeus@3: % For instance:
hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
hekeus@3: % \appendices is invoked.
hekeus@3: % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
hekeus@3: % on whether the user specifies a title: 
hekeus@3: % \section{My appendix title}
hekeus@3: % or not:
hekeus@3: % \section{}
hekeus@3: % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
hekeus@3: % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
hekeus@3: % contents 
hekeus@3: \begingroup
hekeus@3: \catcode`\Q=3
hekeus@3: \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
hekeus@3: \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
hekeus@3: \endgroup
hekeus@3: % end of \@ifmtarg defs
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7
hekeus@3: % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
hekeus@3: % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices 
hekeus@3: % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
hekeus@3: % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
hekeus@3: % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
hekeus@3: % argument (title)
hekeus@3: % note we reroute the call to the old \section*
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
hekeus@3: \@ifmtarg{#1}{%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % we use this if the user calls \section{} after
hekeus@3: % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
hekeus@3: % command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
hekeus@3: \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
hekeus@3: % and in the Table of Contents.
hekeus@3: % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % appendix command for one single appendix
hekeus@3: % normally has no heading. However, if you want a 
hekeus@3: % heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
hekeus@3: % \appendix[Optional Heading]
hekeus@3: \def\appendix{\relax}
hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
hekeus@3:     % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
hekeus@3:     \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
hekeus@3:     % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
hekeus@3:     \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{section}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesection{A}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesectiondis{}% 
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
hekeus@3:     \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
hekeus@3:     \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
hekeus@3:                   \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
hekeus@3:              \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
hekeus@3:              \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
hekeus@3:     % redefine \section command for appendix
hekeus@3:     % leave \section* as is
hekeus@3:     \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
hekeus@3:                     \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
hekeus@3:                                                      % of the normal form
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % appendices command for multiple appendices
hekeus@3: % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
hekeus@3: % declare the individual appendices
hekeus@3: \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
hekeus@3:     % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
hekeus@3:     \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
hekeus@3:     % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
hekeus@3:     \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
hekeus@3:     \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
hekeus@3:     \else%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
hekeus@3:     \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
hekeus@3:     \fi%
hekeus@3:     \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
hekeus@3:     \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
hekeus@3:     % redefine \section command for appendices
hekeus@3:     % leave \section* as is
hekeus@3:     \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
hekeus@3:                     \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
hekeus@3:                     \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument 
hekeus@3:                                                  % of the normal form
hekeus@3: }
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3: % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
hekeus@3: % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
hekeus@3: % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
hekeus@3: % first word which will be rendered in upper case.
hekeus@3: % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
hekeus@3: %    within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
hekeus@3: % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
hekeus@3: % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
hekeus@3: %    interword glue will now work as normal.
hekeus@3: % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
hekeus@3: % to change the font style.
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % the number of lines that are indented to clear it
hekeus@3: % may need to increase if using decenders
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
hekeus@3: % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3: % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
hekeus@3: % be overly cautious
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
hekeus@3: % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
hekeus@3: % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
hekeus@3: % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
hekeus@3: % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
hekeus@3: % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
hekeus@3: % so that it can respond to changes therein.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
hekeus@3: % can take zero or one argument.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
hekeus@3: % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
hekeus@3: % can take zero or one argument.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
hekeus@3: % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
hekeus@3: % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
hekeus@3: % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
hekeus@3: % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. 
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
hekeus@3: % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % definition of \IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3: % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
hekeus@3: % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
hekeus@3: % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
hekeus@3: % argument is the rest of the first word(s).
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
hekeus@3: % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
hekeus@3: % on a new one
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
hekeus@3: % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
hekeus@3: % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
hekeus@3: \noindent
hekeus@3: % calculate the desired height of the big letter
hekeus@3: % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
hekeus@3: % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
hekeus@3: % extract the name of the current font in bold
hekeus@3: % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
hekeus@3: {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
hekeus@3: % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
hekeus@3: % height of the drop letter
hekeus@3: \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
hekeus@3: % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
hekeus@3: % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
hekeus@3: % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
hekeus@3: % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
hekeus@3: \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % and store it as a counter
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
hekeus@3: % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
hekeus@3: % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
hekeus@3: % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
hekeus@3: % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA 
hekeus@3: % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
hekeus@3: % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
hekeus@3: % division. Hence the use of the counters.
hekeus@3: % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
hekeus@3: % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
hekeus@3: % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
hekeus@3: % floating point values
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
hekeus@3: % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
hekeus@3: % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
hekeus@3: % big letter.
hekeus@3: \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
hekeus@3: % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
hekeus@3: % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
hekeus@3: % hanging indent
hekeus@3: \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
hekeus@3: \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
hekeus@3: % end of the isolated calculation environment
hekeus@3: % add in the extra clearance we want
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
hekeus@3: % add in the optional offset
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
hekeus@3: % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
hekeus@3: % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
hekeus@3: % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
hekeus@3: % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
hekeus@3: % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
hekeus@3: % text won't be displaced by it.
hekeus@3: \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
hekeus@3: \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
hekeus@3: \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
hekeus@3: \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
hekeus@3: {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
hekeus@3: % than the specified space of argument one
hekeus@3: % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
hekeus@3: % and issue a \newpage
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
hekeus@3: % be overly cautious
hekeus@3: % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
hekeus@3: % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
hekeus@3: % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
hekeus@3: % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
hekeus@3: \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
hekeus@3: \newpage%
hekeus@3: \fi\endgroup}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
hekeus@3: % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
hekeus@3: % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
hekeus@3: % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a 
hekeus@3: % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
hekeus@3: % MDS 7/2001
hekeus@3: % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
hekeus@3: % and not just the previous section
hekeus@3: \newcounter{IEEEbiography}
hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % photo area size
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in}    % width of the biography photo area
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in}   % depth (height) of the biography photo area
hekeus@3: % area cleared for photo
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in}    % width cleared for the biography photo area
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in}    % depth cleared for the biography photo area
hekeus@3:                                   % actual depth will be a multiple of 
hekeus@3:                                   % \baselineskip, rounded up
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
hekeus@3: \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
hekeus@3: % we need enough space to support the hanging indent
hekeus@3: % the nominal value of the spacer
hekeus@3: % and one extra line for good measure
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
hekeus@3: % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
hekeus@3: % with a new one
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
hekeus@3: % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
hekeus@3: \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
hekeus@3: % the default box for where the photo goes
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
hekeus@3: \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
hekeus@3: % and if so, override the default box with what they want
hekeus@3: \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
hekeus@3: \centering%
hekeus@3: #1%
hekeus@3: \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
hekeus@3: % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
hekeus@3: % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
hekeus@3: % to the biography, not the previous section
hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % one more biography
hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
hekeus@3: % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
hekeus@3: % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
hekeus@3: % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
hekeus@3: % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
hekeus@3: % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
hekeus@3: \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip%  calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
hekeus@3: % set the hanging indent
hekeus@3: \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
hekeus@3: \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
hekeus@3: % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
hekeus@3: % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
hekeus@3: \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
hekeus@3: \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
hekeus@3: % now place the author name and begin the bio text
hekeus@3: \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
hekeus@3: % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
hekeus@3: % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
hekeus@3: % MDS
hekeus@3: \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
hekeus@3:     \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
hekeus@3:     \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
hekeus@3:     \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
hekeus@3:     \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: \par\normalfont}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.6
hekeus@3: % added biography without a photo environment
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
hekeus@3: % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
hekeus@3: \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
hekeus@3: % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
hekeus@3: % to the biography, not the previous section
hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
hekeus@3: \fi%
hekeus@3: % one more biography
hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
hekeus@3: % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
hekeus@3: \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
hekeus@3: \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
hekeus@3: \parskip=0pt\par%
hekeus@3: \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide the user with some old font commands
hekeus@3: % got this from article.cls
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
hekeus@3: % 
hekeus@3: % holds the special notice text
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
hekeus@3:  
hekeus@3: % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
hekeus@3: % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
hekeus@3: \else%
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
hekeus@3: \fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
hekeus@3: % to insert a publisher's ID footer
hekeus@3: % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
hekeus@3: % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
hekeus@3: % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
hekeus@3: % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
hekeus@3: % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author 
hekeus@3: % names and the maintext.
hekeus@3: %
hekeus@3: % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
hekeus@3: % publisher's ID footer
hekeus@3: % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, 
hekeus@3: % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
hekeus@3: % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
hekeus@3: % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
hekeus@3: % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
hekeus@3: % second column
hekeus@3: % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
hekeus@3: % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
hekeus@3: % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
hekeus@3: % and call it even.
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % holds the ID text
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
hekeus@3: % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
hekeus@3: % V1.6 use before \maketitle
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
hekeus@3: % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
hekeus@3: % the title page when using \IEEEpubid
hekeus@3: % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
hekeus@3: % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
hekeus@3: % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
hekeus@3: % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
hekeus@3: % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
hekeus@3: % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been 
hekeus@3: % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
hekeus@3: % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
hekeus@3: % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
hekeus@3: % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% Lockout some commands under various conditions
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % general purpose bit bucket
hekeus@3: \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % flags to prevent multiple warning messages
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNthankstrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
hekeus@3: %%
hekeus@3: % save commands which might be locked out
hekeus@3: % so that the user can later restore them if needed
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
hekeus@3: % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
hekeus@3: % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
hekeus@3: % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
hekeus@3: % paper.
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3:  is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: % and for technotes
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3:  is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
hekeus@3: % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
hekeus@3: % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. 
hekeus@3: % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
hekeus@3: % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
hekeus@3: % from filling up with redundant messages
hekeus@3: \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
hekeus@3: % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname 
hekeus@3: % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
hekeus@3: % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
hekeus@3: % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the 
hekeus@3: % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
hekeus@3: % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
hekeus@3: % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
hekeus@3: % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
hekeus@3: % name can be left undisturbed.
hekeus@3: \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
hekeus@3: \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
hekeus@3: % and make biography point to our bogus biography
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
hekeus@3: \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid 
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
hekeus@3:  is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
hekeus@3: \fi
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
hekeus@3: \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
hekeus@3: \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
hekeus@3: \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % need a backslash character for typeout output
hekeus@3: {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
hekeus@3: |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
hekeus@3: \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
hekeus@3: Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide for legacy commands
hekeus@3: \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
hekeus@3: \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
hekeus@3: \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
hekeus@3: \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
hekeus@3: \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
hekeus@3: \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
hekeus@3: \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
hekeus@3: \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
hekeus@3: \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
hekeus@3: \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide for legacy environments
hekeus@3: \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
hekeus@3: \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
hekeus@3: \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
hekeus@3: \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
hekeus@3: \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
hekeus@3: \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
hekeus@3: \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
hekeus@3: \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
hekeus@3: \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
hekeus@3: \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
hekeus@3: % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
hekeus@3: \def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
hekeus@3: \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
hekeus@3: \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: \endinput
hekeus@3: 
hekeus@3: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
hekeus@3: % That's all folks!
hekeus@3: 




